<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Harald+Friedrich</id>
	<title>TARGET 3001! PCB Design Freeware is a Layout CAD Software|Support, Tutorials, Shop - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Harald+Friedrich"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Special:Contributions/Harald_Friedrich"/>
	<updated>2026-07-23T20:27:08Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.42.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Signal_polygon&amp;diff=29412</id>
		<title>Signal polygon</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Signal_polygon&amp;diff=29412"/>
		<updated>2026-05-27T13:34:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Create a partial ground plane area like a polygon */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For the handling of polygons with a signal in V17, V16, V15... please have a look here: [[Freehand groundplane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= General =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From TARGET V18 onwards, a ground plane is treated as a signal polygon and can be equipped with individual attributes. This means, every ground plane is a signal polygon, but not all signal polygons are automatically ground planes. Any number of signal polygons can be created on one copper side. A copper element is considered connected when its center touches the filled polygon.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode to draw a signal polygon:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*by keyboard key [6],&lt;br /&gt;
*by menu item &amp;quot;6 Draw ground polygon&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*by icon [[Image:PolySignal.jpg]] among the drawing functions [[Image:Pen.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygonicon.jpg|Icon]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Icon to be found in the layout view among the drawing functions&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Construction of a ground plane in TARGET =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ground plane (for example for the signal GND) in TARGET must be imagined as a set of three planes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the area layer, the contour of the ground plane is displayed as a filled polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*On the deletion layer the auras (= the safety distances to the non-GND signals) which pass through the ground plane are shown&lt;br /&gt;
*On the copper-layer the conductive tracks and all other conductive elements are .&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tracks which do not carry the signal of the ground potential do not belong to the ground. They get an aura, a safety spacing, which is shown on the deletion layer. So they get separated from the ground. Tracks that belong to the ground plane do not have an aura. They get embedded to the ground plane and thus connect the ground plane to GND. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Masseflaeche_e.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
Setup of a ground plane in TARGET&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the very end of the layout work the ground plane contour of the area layer should be shifted to the copper layer together with the auras of the deletion layer. We say the signal polygon is filled or the computation in the copper layer is executed. So there are&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;two states of a ground plane: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;filled, computed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;not filled, not computed&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The advantage of the not computed state (a graphical area separation) is that any change to the ground plane is immediately visible on the screen without any loss of time. Therefore it is best to fill the ground plane only at the very end, when you go for production. Otherwise you maybe pour your set in copper too early and further layout work will be ponderous a bit. However, you can turn bsck a filled ground plane into the not computed state easily.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Old polygons found =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you open a project which had been created by a version V18 or older, the following dialog will appear:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:altepolygone_e.jpg|Old polygons found]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The dialog &amp;quot;Old polygons found&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What&#039;s behind it?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have created a project with a version V18 or older, the conversion of polygons might cause minor changes to the polygon surfaces (roundings, etc). The printed circuit board would then look slightly different than it appeared earlier. Therefore, PCB manufacturers should not carry out the conversion. However, the normal user should convert old polygons to new ones. The new polygons are easier to handle and more flexible than the old ones. It is preferable to compute the new polygon filling &#039;&#039;&#039;at the end of the design process&#039;&#039;&#039; and leave it in a primitive state, see the option &amp;quot;Compute filling&amp;quot; at the bottom of the following dialog. Then one can fade in/out each of the layers involved separately (&amp;quot;copper&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;deletion&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;area&amp;quot;) the same as in earlier versions. The functions &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; as well as the creation of Gerber data will fill the areas later anyway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Use the entire PCB area =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:entire_PCB_area.jpg|Use the entire PCB area for a ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Use the entire PCB area for a ground plane&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a partial ground plane area like a polygon =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If not the whole area of your PCB is to be used as ground plane but only a smaller area, this can be defined as signal polygon. Select the signal polygon function with the keyboard key &#039;&#039;&#039;[6]&#039;&#039;&#039; and set the corner points of the polygon with [[Conventions|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]. If you keep the keys [Shift] or [Ctrl] pressed, the edges are generated exactly angular. In the last polygon segment, press &#039;&#039;&#039;[Return]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Conventions|&#039;&#039;&#039;M2&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to end the polygon course exactly at the starting point. The dialog for editing the signal polygon opens immediately:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:massepolygondDLG_e.jpg|Dialog for signal polygon edition]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The dialog for signal polygon edition&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Polygon Info ==&lt;br /&gt;
Nearly self explanatory: Shows the number of corners, the perimeter and the surface area are either metric or imperial, depending on the unit set. The values cannot be edited here.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Layer == &lt;br /&gt;
A polygon with signal assignment can only be created on a copper layer. The copper layers used in your project can be selected from the drop down list. Select the copper layer upon which your polygon later shall appear (copper bottom, copper top, copper inside). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Select the signal to be assigned to the polygon. At this point you can only assign one signal to one polygon. Creating a [[Star shaped ground]] is a separate topic. Please have a look there.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Track width == &lt;br /&gt;
In easy words track width is the thickness of the pen which you use to fill the polygon with color. Sounds a bit childish but in respect to the production technique it is the best way to compare. In Gerber a photo pen follows the lines on a photosensitive board with an aperture according to the track width. The sharper the tip of the pen, the more filigree structures can be built. Discuss the smallest value with your PCB-house. Here in Europe the minimum value of 0.15 mm is common.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following picture shows the polygon with a little notch see arrow. The reason is a track width set too wide. The pen can not go through this bottle neck.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygone_gap.jpg|Track width too big]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Track width too big to close the area at this spot.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referring to the track width set here the DesignRuleCheck later checks whether the minimum track width od a connection is fulfilled. The track width must also be seen in combination with the &amp;quot;Grid spacing&amp;quot;. A gridded ground plane in consists of a net-structure made of orthogonal intersecting lines. The width of this lines you also define here. You can only enter one value for the track width here. The net structure (= ground plane in lines) always has a square mesh structure.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Grid spacing ==&lt;br /&gt;
A ground plane in lines offers production advantages in galvanization and also is preferable in respect to electromagnetic performance of the signal. In addition to the track width you can define the distance of the mesh, the grid spacing.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygone_grid.jpg|Ground plane in lines]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Copper top: Ground plane in lines (to the right). Track width: 0.3mm, Grid spacing: 0.5mm&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTE: If the grid spacing gets too wide, the polygon will not be able to convey the signal any more. The limit is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Grid spacing &amp;gt; Minimum &#039;&#039;Drill hole diameter&#039;&#039; + 2 x &#039;&#039;Width of the rest copper concerning pads&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you use the &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; routine or if you &amp;quot;Compute Air Wires (Ratsnest)&amp;quot; such a widely spaced polygon grid can not convey the signal which should run through it. So there will remain an air wire and the soldering pads in question need to be connected by a signal track manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following message could appear when using the &amp;quot;Check project routine&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Signal-Polygon too chunky: GND on layer 2...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:signalpolygon_grid_too_wide.jpg|Ground plane gridded too wide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Copper top: The ground plane is gridded too wide. Please use a smaller grid.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== PCB edge spacing ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is helpful to have a little spacing between ground plane and cutting edge of the PCB. It can avoid a short circuit by just touching the board by any other object. Also a crosstalk of the signal can be avoided. Define here how far you put back the edge of the ground plane from the edge of the board. Cutting edge of the board is middle of the PCB outline.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygone_edge.jpg|Distance of the polygon to the cutting edge of the board]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Distance to the edge: left without, right with &amp;quot;stand back&amp;quot; from the edge of the board. In the image to the right the left polygon shows a PCB edge spacing of 0.8mm, the one right beside shows a spacing to the edge of 0.4mm.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rank ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Polygons can overlap, they even can interlace - sure they never should touch each other. Which of the polygons should dominate the other (taking away some of the others shape) can be defined by its rank. The higher the cipher of the rank of a polygon is, the more dominant it is. A polygon with rank 2 dominates a polygon having only rank 1. This means the one with rank 2 takes away the overlapping from the one with rank 1 and so on. There are 99 ranks possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygonrang_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Copper bottom: Interlacing polygons with different signals and different ranks.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The distance between the two surfaces is determined by the value of the &amp;quot;Spacing between single signals&amp;quot;, see default entry in the &amp;quot;Check project&amp;quot; dialog. Unless the individual entry for the &amp;quot;Minimum track spacing&amp;quot; of one of the signals (or their signal classes) would be set larger. Then this value would be used. So the higher value of both will be used to determine the gap.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust auras ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you create a new signal polygon, the auras of the tracks, vias and pads touching the polygon or being inside the polygon will be adapted. If you later edit the auras manually, they will not be adjusted automatically when you refill the polygon unless you check the &amp;quot;Adjust auras&amp;quot; box. The following will happen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*a different-signal pad/via gets isolated&lt;br /&gt;
*a same-signal pad gets a thermal&lt;br /&gt;
*solder pads without pad number get a thermal too&lt;br /&gt;
*a same-signal via will be completely embedded to the plane&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Afterwards you can manually change the auras of the individual soldering pads and vias. TARGET will not propose to adjust the auras when recalculating the polygon. If you want to embed a pad completely, you can set its aura to zero later or use the field &amp;quot;No aura for these layers:&amp;quot; and list the corresponding copper layer(s). Then let the area (s) be refilled, i. e. the dialog &amp;quot;Edit signal polygon&amp;quot; needs to be opened again and the option &amp;quot;Fill directly (Execute computation in copper layer)&amp;quot; needs to be ticked. Vias never get automatic heat sinks. In general vias are always connected over their entire surface (= embedded). If the user later adds an aura to the via on the ground plane layer, it remains isolated in this ground plane, i. e. unconnected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create thermal pads ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The soldering pad of a component lead having the same signal as the ground polygon, e. g. GND, should be fully embedded in order to connect as best as possible. However, too much heat would dissipate into the ground plane too quickly during soldering, so that the solder agens would not bond well with the copper. Better create a [[Thermal Pads|thermal pad]]. A thermal pad (heat sink, thermal) is a soldering pad which is surrounded by a safety spacing (aura) but connected to the ground plane by small bars only. This prevents the heat energy from dissipating into the plane too quickly when getting soldered. These automatic bars are cross-shaped to the pad.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== also for pads that are already connected ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the sub-option &amp;quot;also for pads that are already connected&amp;quot; is selected (default), then those soldering pads will get 4 ligaments (ridges) if possible, which were already connected to tracks manually or by the use of the autorouter. If this box is unchecked, no ligaments (ridges) will be created for all soldering pads from which a manually routed track starts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The width of these automatic thermal ligaments from  V20.5.0.17 is:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*for drilled pads max 2/3 of the drill hole&lt;br /&gt;
*for SMDs max 2/3 of the thin side&lt;br /&gt;
*as least the filling width of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*at most the double of the filling width of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The width of the automatic thermal ligaments was before:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*at least as wide as the line width of the polygon (except for very narrow SMD pads, finepitch)&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum double the width of the fill lines of the polygon&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum width as the smaller side of the pad (pad height, pad width)&lt;br /&gt;
*maximum as wide as 2/3 of the larger side of the pad (pad height, pad width)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can connect these pads with wider tracks manually. Polygonal pads are not automatically connected with ligaments (=not automatically made thermals). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[http://office.ibfriedrich.com/EineFrageEN/t21/q1/question.html Why do those ligaments in thermal pads lead into empty space sometimes?]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: signalpolygone_thermal.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The pads numbered 1 of the two components being located to two polygons. Left with thermal pads, right without - thus embedded completely to the plane.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== also for vias ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TARGET will completely embed a via in the ground plane if it carries the same ground potential. Since a via is normally not soldered, there is no reason why this should not be the case. If you still want to equip your vias like a heat sink with aura and ligaments (ridges), you can check this box.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Suppress ligaments in thermals ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&#039;t like the ligaments, double-click the via and untick the ligaments-box in the dialog (underneath the PadStack button). Now you could set them manually as a simple copper rectangle furnished with the same signal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: Stege_unterdruecken _e.jpg|Suppress ligaments in a certain thermal|none]]Image: Option (untick box) to actively suppress the creation of ligaments if the object comes out as a thermal.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete islands ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Rang_u_Auren_e.jpg|Rank and Auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A not connected piece of a signal polygon is called &amp;quot;island&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;orphan&amp;quot;. They dont have any purpose and often make trouble. So they should be removed. TARGET does this automatically if you tick the box. A ground plane gets connected by a pad of a component, a via having an aura of 0 upon this layer or a piece of track running through the polygon plane and having aura =0. Always the signal name (the signal) must be identical. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Compute filling ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: compute_filling.jpg|Compute filling]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filling here means something like &amp;quot;copper pour&amp;quot;. It is when you merge the signal track structures and the ground area on the copper layer. TARGET then renders the complete structure of &amp;quot;Copper top&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Copper bottom&amp;quot; (or &amp;quot;Copper inside&amp;quot; if you have) including the ground plane. You can do it instantly (&amp;quot;Fill directly&amp;quot;) by confirming the dialog or you can leave the construction in an intermediate state (&amp;quot;Do not compute yet&amp;quot;) so that the signal polygon of the ground plane is defined like a primitive. It is kept in waiting position to be handled separately on the &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot;-layer. So the ground plane still can be adapted, moved and trated as you please.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fill directly (Execute computation in copper layer) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The polygon immediately gets created wit all interactions to all other elements upon the copper layer. It is displayed the way ist will be produced at the end. Any change in design requires the complete computation (rendering). This process can take some seconds in bigger projects. Therefore it might be better to use the option: &amp;quot;Do not compute yet (primitive state on area layer)&amp;quot; see below.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_6.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Example of a double sided Layout, ground plane on copper top, filled directly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Do not compute yet (primitive state on area layer) ===&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this item, the ground plane at first is built up three-layered:&lt;br /&gt;
*Its shape on layer &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot;, it is the primitive of the ground plane&lt;br /&gt;
*The auras of all signals on layer &amp;quot;Deletion&amp;quot;, i. e. the spacings of all signals giving clearance to the ground potential (s).&lt;br /&gt;
*The tracks on layer &amp;quot;Copper&amp;quot;. All signal tracks including the ground signal (s) are displayed here.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_1.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: A double sided layout&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_2.jpg|Primitive of the ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The ground plane as a priitive created by keyboard key &#039;&#039;[6] Draw signal polygon&#039;&#039;. It is displayed on layer &amp;quot;14, Area top&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_3.jpg|The auras]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: The aura of each of the signals is displayed on layer &amp;quot;15, Deletion top&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_4.jpg|The tracks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: DThe copper tracks on layer &amp;quot;16, Copper top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: groundpic_5.jpg|A double sided layout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: All three layers Copper, Deletion and Area are faded in, in addition layer &amp;quot;23, PCB Outline&amp;quot; (light red). The state still is  &amp;quot;Not yet computed&amp;quot;, because the three layers are still separate which means not yet &amp;quot;poured into copper&amp;quot;. Ticking the boxes to the right each fades them in, unticking fades them out.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Unfill an already filled (computed) ground plane =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Retrieve an already computed filled ground plane to the three levels copper, deletion and area by selecting the entry &amp;quot;Do not fill all polygons&amp;quot; in menu &#039;&#039;Actions/Ground planes&#039;&#039;. Now you can show, hide and edit the groundplane separately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:groundpic_e.jpg|Recover ground plane|none]]Image: The ground plane is a triplet again&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Hide filling, show outline only =&lt;br /&gt;
[[image: compute_filling.jpg|Compute filling]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Section of the dialog&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is for a better overview and easier grip of elements within the ground plane.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Show or hide polygons upon visible layers =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PolygoneEinAusblenden_e.jpg|Show and hide]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Show and hide polygons&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The key [&amp;gt;] fills polygons on visible layers. So they get visible, if area- and deletion layers before had been faded out. Apart from this they are just calculated new.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key [&amp;lt;] un- fills all polygons, shifts them to the area layer and fades out all area- and deletion layers. The polygons get faded out so to speak. Only the ligaments of thermal pads remain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The key [-] un-fills all polygons, moves them to the area layer and ,akes all area and deletion layers visible. The polygons remain visible, but are in a non-calculated state.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create a keep out area =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A keep out is an &amp;quot;area within a copper area&amp;quot; free of copper. Draw it in any shape (rectangle, trinagle, circle, normal polygon) into the deletion layer of the respective copper side. Maybe the &amp;quot;Fill directly&amp;quot; command for the signal polygon has to be executed again to have the keep out take effect.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image: keepout.jpg|Creating a keep out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Draw a keep out to the deletion layer: Select drawing mode, right click ([[M2]]) the desired layer in teh sidebar, draw the keep out area. &amp;lt;small&amp;gt;(alias keepout, keep-out)&amp;lt;/small&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= List of polygons =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is an item in layout menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Several signal polygons in a project are clearly displayed in a list. All relevant properties of the signal polygons are visible at a glance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ListePolygone1_e.jpg|List of polygons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: List of signal polygons with different properties in one project: Signal name, layer to appear on, line width of filling (=track width), grid spacing, distance to PCB edge and rank.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Rank 2 dominates rank 1, rank 3 dominates rank 2 and/or 1, and so on. When overlapping, the polygon with the higher rank digit takes away something from the polygon with the smaller rank digit. See &amp;quot;Copper top&amp;quot; (blue): The polygon on the left has rank digit 2, which is higher than the polygon on the right, having only rank digit 1. The red polygon has also rank digit 1, but this is irrelevant in this construction, as it is located on &amp;quot;Copper bottom&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double-clicking on the first line of the list displays the following screen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ListePolygone2_e.jpg|Clicking  [[M11]] to a line of the list]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Image: Clicking [[M11]] to a list entry zooms to the respective signal polygon and marks it. At the same time its dialog: &amp;quot;Edit signal polygon&amp;quot; opens for inspection/edition.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Text in a ground plane =  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Groundplane#Text_in_ground_plane|Text in ground plane]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Delete groundplane =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight groundplane by mouseclick [[M1]] and delete it by pressing the [Del] key.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Attention when making changes after &amp;quot;filling&amp;quot;! =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you render the filling of a ground plane (execute the computation in copper layer, &amp;quot;fill&amp;quot;), this is done exactly representing the conditions that apply at the time of rendering. If you make changes to elements having an aura afterwards or change deletions or other parameters that will influence the area, then the area will have the wrong shape prior to the next rendering! Therefore, when checking the project or calculating the air wires and with each new output, the area always will be recalculated so that all current conditions are taken into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unfortunately, the project can be saved in this inconsistent state before recalculation. When outputting data for manufacturing, the correct recalculation of all surfaces is then carried out, which can lead to differences. To make sure that the PCB looks on the screen as it will be produced, always run &amp;quot;Check Project&amp;quot; in menu &amp;quot;Actions/Check and test&amp;quot; as the last step before ordering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
alias: freehand groundplane, customized ground, copper pour, copper fill &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Signal-Polygon]][[fr:polygone de signal]][[Category:Layout]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29411</id>
		<title>AI Assistant &quot;T-3001&quot;</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29411"/>
		<updated>2026-03-20T10:13:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version V34, the AI assistant named “T-3001” is available in the bottom-right corner of the TARGET interface as a chatbot to answer your questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KI-AssistentT-3001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Ki-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also call “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001_en.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter your questions about using TARGET 3001! The more specific your question is, the higher the chance of getting a useful answer. If you notice that “T-3001” doesn’t understand your question correctly or gives an unhelpful answer, simply enter your email address in the input field below and press [Return]. The chat history will then be forwarded directly to the TARGET team and promptly answered by a human via email as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AI assistant “T-3001” is still in training and may provide incorrect or even dangerous answers. Users must always first verify the plausibility of every answer! The questions and answers are processed by an external artificial intelligence (AI) system. The questions and answers are stored on our servers for one week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, do not include any private or confidential information in your inquiries. Please report any incorrect or inappropriate responses to us via [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com email].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Assistant IA &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:KI-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29410</id>
		<title>AI Assistant &quot;T-3001&quot;</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=AI_Assistant_%22T-3001%22&amp;diff=29410"/>
		<updated>2026-03-20T10:13:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version V34, the AI assistant named “T-3001” is available in the bottom-right corner of the TARGET interface as a chatbot to answer your questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:KI-AssistentT-3001.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Ki-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also call “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001en.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please enter your questions about using TARGET 3001! The more specific your question is, the higher the chance of getting a useful answer. If you notice that “T-3001” doesn’t understand your question correctly or gives an unhelpful answer, simply enter your email address in the input field below and press [Return]. The chat history will then be forwarded directly to the TARGET team and promptly answered by a human via email as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The AI assistant “T-3001” is still in training and may provide incorrect or even dangerous answers. Users must always first verify the plausibility of every answer! The questions and answers are processed by an external artificial intelligence (AI) system. The questions and answers are stored on our servers for one week.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, do not include any private or confidential information in your inquiries. Please report any incorrect or inappropriate responses to us via [mailto:target@ibfriedrich.com email].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Assistant IA &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:KI-Assistent &amp;quot;T-3001&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=TARGET_3001!_Viewer&amp;diff=29409</id>
		<title>TARGET 3001! Viewer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=TARGET_3001!_Viewer&amp;diff=29409"/>
		<updated>2026-03-19T11:59:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Use the TARGET 3001! viewer for inspection. Hand it over to your customers/partners to present, evaluate and discuss your projects!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewer-350.png|Link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/v34/english/tarv34viewer_e.exe|Viewer|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/v34/english/tarv34viewer_e.exe Download]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- lots of functions active&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no installation required&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- commercial use allowed&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- Gerber export driver active, some others not&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no library/data base access&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no simulation&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- no save&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;- copy and paste without paste&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:viewer.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The viewer property is indicated in the opening image.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:TARGET 3001! Viewer]][[fr:TARGET 3001! Viewer]][[Category:About TARGET 3001!]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Scaling.jpg&amp;diff=29402</id>
		<title>File:Scaling.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Scaling.jpg&amp;diff=29402"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T16:28:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Scaling.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29401</id>
		<title>Screen resolution - Pixels - Scaling - Blurry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29401"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T16:27:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs automatically. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET will automatically enlarge its interface and dialogs. This makes them easy to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scaling.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
(Figure 1: Windows scaling, here 125%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If the screen resolution of TARGET is too high or too low, or if text elements appear too large, too small, or blurry/washed out, it may be helpful to find the settings that Windows uses for TARGET:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:High dpi.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Résolution d&#039;écran - Pixels - Mise à l&#039;échelle - Affichage flou]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auflösung - Bildschirmauflösung - Resolution - Pixel - Skalierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29400</id>
		<title>Current topics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29400"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T12:08:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dear TARGET 3001! user,&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v34/en/index.html V34] is available. We are pleased that the development of TARGET goes on continuously. There are no changes in our license and product policy. The transition from V33 (or older) to V34 is a paid update for which we offer low update prices. All further development of TARGET 3001! now flows into V34, all updates within your V34 are free. See TARGET menu Help/Free Update. Look below for all highlights, the complete list of new features please find in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt LOGBOOK]. If you would like to go for the V34 - our shop is open:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border =&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing =&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Yours sincerely,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Harald Friedrich&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;and the TARGET 3001! Team&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Cartbutton75.png|link=https://shop.ibfriedrich.com|...to the Shop]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://shop.ibfriedrich.com to the SHOP]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V33-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V33&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V32-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V32&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V31-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V31&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:gbrx3logo.jpg|GerberX3 ready]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Gerber data: [[Gerber#Gerber_X2|Gerber X2 and Gerber X3 implemented]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;GenCAD: [[GenCAD|New functions added.  DFM approved.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Differential Pairs: Easier to create, quicker to connect.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:ligament.jpg|Panel with bars]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since January 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Panel: [[Panel#Leave_bars_like_predefined_breaking_points|Set a Panel outline together with bars inbetween the individual boards]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Multiline Text: Performance improved&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:aktuelles_snapeda.jpg|SnapEDA|link=SnapEDA]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2020:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[SnapEDA|SnapEDA]]: Interface with SnapEDA. Component not found in TARGET? Load it from SnapEDA. 3D models too!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Convergence-pad|Covergence pad]]: Make any pad a convergence pad. Improve the quality of hand soldered junctions significantly. It&#039;s amazing!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:v30_logo-160.png|TARGET 3001! V30]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;New V30:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Autorouter#Pilot_Router|Pilot Router]]: Direct the path of a track by hovering the cursor tip, a click makes the Pilot Router complete it.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Give a track a certain length by [[Meander_a_track#Meander_interactively|interactive meandering]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_classes#Special_distances_to_other_signal_classes|Signal classes can keep special distances between each other]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tooltip]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; shows all elements superposed at cursor position&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Huge 3D-STEP models can be used at [[STEP_3D_Import#Reduce_the_complexity_of_a_STEP_model|reduced complexity]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Select#Enlarge_selection_by_.5BShift.5D_and_.5BM1.5D|Selecting with [Shift] + [M1]]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; also works through nodes and vias&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Track#Streamline_a_track|Track fine tuning:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Press [7] to optimize and streamline the selected track segments&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component buttons in the sidebar collect your favorite parts in their context menu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Suppress_ligaments_in_thermals|Exclude pads for heat sinks:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For solder pads and vias the generation of ridges for heat sinks can be suppressed individually&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:v20_160.png|TARGET 3001! V20]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;News in V20:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Push&amp;amp;Shove]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: When routing a new track, neighboring tracks are pushed aside, if necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Neighbors of the neighbor follow like a cascade. Spacing rules are obeyed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Move vertices to the grid/add any point to the grid&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Push&amp;amp;Shove has put some tracks out of the grid? No problem:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drag vertices back to the grid by adding the [Shift] key. Or you would generate additional grid points just at the spot where you are.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component drag and drop from&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Samacsys SamacSys®]  and  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Ultra_Librarian UltraLibrarian®]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Selecting track segments&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: With [Shift] and [Ctrl] as usual in Windows select either &amp;quot;all inbetween&amp;quot; or just the first and last highlighted track segment.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Design Rule Check&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The check for minimum spacings was significantly accelerated.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Airwires_/_Ratsnest#Number_of_air_wires|Air wires]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Number of air wires - A useful little feature to plan and calculate you routing activities.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Builder_Bildmarke.jpg|Builder]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2018:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Show_or_hide_polygons_upon_visible_layers|Signal polygons]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Show or hide signal polygons using keys [&amp;lt;] and [&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/c-builder/index.html Builder]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: COMPONIVERSE extended by the web-based component editor &amp;quot;BUILDER&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Backup#Autosaves|Autosaves]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Up to nine renewing autosaves possible instead of only three&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Gerber_Special#Gerber_file_name.2C_Gerber_file_extension|GerberSpecial]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: XGerber: Standard Gerber file extensions can be chosen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Printing script format]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Printing by scripts now possible in format *.pdf too&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:news160.png|News]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[MID_Tutorial#Rotation.2C_Position.2C_Dimension|MID-Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: A click top left upon the &amp;quot;standard orientation&amp;quot;-icon shows the measurements of the MID-body at the bottom left&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Use_the_entire_PCB_area|Groundplane]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Item &amp;quot;Entire PCB area&amp;quot; added to menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Use the entire PCB area as a signal polygon.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Reload_properties_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Properties: Item &amp;quot;Reload properties from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Create_components_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Component: Item &amp;quot;Generate component from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen_160.png|Predefine tools|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Start_output]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since October 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Pick_engraver_tools_from_a_jacket_according_to_a_list|Isolation milling]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Tools can be allocated picking them from their place in a jacket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:polygon160.png|Polygonal ground planes|link=Signal_polygon]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon|Polygonal ground planes]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Any filled polygon on a copper layer can be furnished with a signal. Each can be handled like a separate ground plane. It can individually be furnished with attributes. On one copper layer any number of polygons with different signals can be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:stueckliste160.png|Boost your BoM|link=Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM|Boost your BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Bill of material (BoM): If you add a certain property to a part and you also add the leading characters &amp;quot;BOM-&amp;quot;, this particular property automatically will appear in the BoM.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen160.png|Engraving bit calculator|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top|Engraving bit calculator]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Insulation milling: In insulation milling copper tracks are circumscribed by an engraving bit. The width of the rubout depends on the angle of its tip and its immersion depth. Calculate these parameters quickly by the use of the Engraving bit calculator in menu &amp;quot;Engraving Insulation channels&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:dukoZaun160.jpg|Via fence|link=Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Signal tracks can on both sides be fenced by a chain of vias. High frequency signals by this means can be shielded from external electromagnetic influence.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:lochraster160.png|Breadboard|link=Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Polygonale breadboard area: Create any polygonal breadboard area in your layout. Hples have the property of a via. You may edit each afterwards or give it a signal. But this is no must. By means of such breadboard areas you easily create &amp;quot;creativity buffers&amp;quot; for your design. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:password160.png|Password protection|link=Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Protect your project from third party access by the use of a password. But not only a project can be protected: All projects, being created by your license can automatically be protected by a &amp;quot;licence password&amp;quot;. This one is demanded if one of your projects shall be opened by a TARGET öicense other than yours. So you protect your intellectual property from third party access. Also a &amp;quot;drift off&amp;quot; towards the spheres of your competitors will be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:pdf160.png|Instant PDF|link=PDF_creation]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[PDF_creation|Instant PDF]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Create a PDF file of your circuit diagram or PCB without a PDF printer. Achieve a quick transfer of your designs as a PDF. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:componiverse_n.jpg|160px|COMPONIVERSE®: New engine, new look, new features|link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/en/componiverse_introduction/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Componiverse|COMPONIVERSE®]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The interactive component cloud of the  TARGET 3001! community. Load up your components and download the ones others have uploaded.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The TARGET 3001! component exchange. New engine, new look, new features.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:onequestion_n_e.jpg|160px|One question: Ask a question to a certain issue]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One question...|Ask a question]]: TARGET 3001! internal FAQ system. Correlates to the TARGET dialog from which the question has been asked.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:samacsys_n.jpg|160px|SamacSys: Cooperation with component portal]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Components of the British component portal [[Samacsys|SamacSys]] can instantly be overtaken to TARGET 3001!. Select components found and place them by drag and drop to your TARGET 3001!-design. Free software &amp;quot;Library Loader&amp;quot; required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:pickplaceprop.jpg|160px|Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. Here: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. In this example it&#039;s the properties: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:cappedvia.jpg|160px|Plugged and capped vias]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Introduced &amp;quot;Plugged&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Capped&amp;quot; for vias and pads (e.g. for thermal vias)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:PinTextfunktionSignalname.jpg|160px|Signal name as text function]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Pin names in schematic symbols can also have the signal name as text function (e.g. for a RS232 D-sub 9)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:polygonalepads.jpg|160px|Polygonale Pads]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Polygonal pads: Increased visible resolution&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:ToolbarpaletteLeiterbahn.jpg|160px|Leiterbahnvorlagen]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Toolbar: Palette &amp;quot;Tracks&amp;quot;: Programmed buttons also affect tracks yet to come&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Symbolgeneratoralfanumerisch.jpg|160px|Pin names alphanumerical]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since May 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Symbol generator: Pin numbers also alphanumerical (A1, A2 ... B1 ...)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:2x2meter.jpg|160px|2 by 2 meters drawing area]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since April 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum area now 2m x 2m or 6.5ft x 6.5ft.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|120px|Component editor]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Component editor: Get a new component quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offers subsequently the automatic functions needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* A new symbol and/or package can be derived from existing ones!&lt;br /&gt;
* See menu: Components/Create a new component...&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:RectangleByCoordinates.jpg|120px|Rectangle]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* New tool for a quicker design of rectangles.&lt;br /&gt;
* Simply enter mesurements in cm or coordinates.&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag from the center or from the side.&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions [[image:RechteckKoordIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:TextTag_e.jpg|120px|TextTag]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Text Tag offering useful textfunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place comments, advice, notes of any kind to schematic or layout&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions  [[image:TextTagIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;read more in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt TARGET 3001! LOGBOOK]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Thèmes actuels]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aktuelles]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29399</id>
		<title>Current topics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Current_topics&amp;diff=29399"/>
		<updated>2026-03-16T12:08:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Dear TARGET 3001! user,&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v34/en/index.html V34] is available. We are pleased that the development of TARGET goes on continuously. There are no changes in our license and product policy. The transition from V33 (or older) to V34 is a paid update for which we offer low update prices. All further development of TARGET 3001! now flows into V34, all updates within your V34 are free. See TARGET menu Help/Free Update. Look below for all highlights, the complete list of new features please find in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt LOGBOOK]. If you would like to go for the V34 - our shop is open:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table border =&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing =&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;30&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Yours sincerely,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Harald Friedrich&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;and the TARGET 3001! Team&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Cartbutton75.png|link=https://shop.ibfriedrich.com|...to the Shop]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[https://shop.ibfriedrich.com to the SHOP]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V33-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V33&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v33/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V32-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V32&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v32/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:V31-logo-wiki.png|link=https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;RELEASE OF OUR NEW VERSION V31&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Discover all new [https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/v31/en/index.html Features] of our new Version at a glance.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:gbrx3logo.jpg|GerberX3 ready]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Gerber data: [[Gerber#Gerber_X2|Gerber X2 and Gerber X3 implemented]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;GenCAD: [[GenCAD|New functions added.  DFM approved.]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Differential Pairs: Easier to create, quicker to connect.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:ligament.jpg|Panel with bars]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since January 2021:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Panel: [[Panel#Leave_bars_like_predefined_breaking_points|Set a Panel outline together with bars inbetween the individual boards]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Multiline Text: Performance improved&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:aktuelles_snapeda.jpg|SnapEDA|link=SnapEDA]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2020:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[SnapEDA|SnapEDA]]: Interface with SnapEDA. Component not found in TARGET? Load it from SnapEDA. 3D models too!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Convergence-pad|Covergence pad]]: Make any pad a convergence pad. Improve the quality of hand soldered junctions significantly. It&#039;s amazing!&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:v30_logo-160.png|TARGET 3001! V30]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;New V30:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Autorouter#Pilot_Router|Pilot Router]]: Direct the path of a track by hovering the cursor tip, a click makes the Pilot Router complete it.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Give a track a certain length by [[Meander_a_track#Meander_interactively|interactive meandering]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_classes#Special_distances_to_other_signal_classes|Signal classes can keep special distances between each other]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Tooltip]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; shows all elements superposed at cursor position&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Huge 3D-STEP models can be used at [[STEP_3D_Import#Reduce_the_complexity_of_a_STEP_model|reduced complexity]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Select#Enlarge_selection_by_.5BShift.5D_and_.5BM1.5D|Selecting with [Shift] + [M1]]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; also works through nodes and vias&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Track#Streamline_a_track|Track fine tuning:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Press [7] to optimize and streamline the selected track segments&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component buttons in the sidebar collect your favorite parts in their context menu&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Suppress_ligaments_in_thermals|Exclude pads for heat sinks:]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For solder pads and vias the generation of ridges for heat sinks can be suppressed individually&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:v20_160.png|TARGET 3001! V20]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;News in V20:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Push&amp;amp;Shove]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: When routing a new track, neighboring tracks are pushed aside, if necessary.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Neighbors of the neighbor follow like a cascade. Spacing rules are obeyed.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Move vertices to the grid/add any point to the grid&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Push&amp;amp;Shove has put some tracks out of the grid? No problem:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Drag vertices back to the grid by adding the [Shift] key. Or you would generate additional grid points just at the spot where you are.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Component drag and drop from&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Samacsys SamacSys®]  and  [https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php/Ultra_Librarian UltraLibrarian®]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Selecting track segments&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: With [Shift] and [Ctrl] as usual in Windows select either &amp;quot;all inbetween&amp;quot; or just the first and last highlighted track segment.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Design Rule Check&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The check for minimum spacings was significantly accelerated.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Airwires_/_Ratsnest#Number_of_air_wires|Air wires]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Number of air wires - A useful little feature to plan and calculate you routing activities.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:Builder_Bildmarke.jpg|Builder]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2018:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Show_or_hide_polygons_upon_visible_layers|Signal polygons]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Show or hide signal polygons using keys [&amp;lt;] and [&amp;gt;]&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://ibfriedrich.com/landingpage/c-builder/index.html Builder]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: COMPONIVERSE extended by the web-based component editor &amp;quot;BUILDER&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Backup#Autosaves|Autosaves]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Up to nine renewing autosaves possible instead of only three&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Gerber_Special#Gerber_file_name.2C_Gerber_file_extension|GerberSpecial]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: XGerber: Standard Gerber file extensions can be chosen&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Printing script format]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Printing by scripts now possible in format *.pdf too&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:news160.png|News]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since November 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[MID_Tutorial#Rotation.2C_Position.2C_Dimension|MID-Edition]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: A click top left upon the &amp;quot;standard orientation&amp;quot;-icon shows the measurements of the MID-body at the bottom left&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon#Use_the_entire_PCB_area|Groundplane]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Item &amp;quot;Entire PCB area&amp;quot; added to menu &amp;quot;Actions/Ground planes&amp;quot;. Use the entire PCB area as a signal polygon.&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Reload_properties_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Properties: Item &amp;quot;Reload properties from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Component_properties#Create_components_from_a_CSV_file|Component browser]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Component: Item &amp;quot;Generate component from a CSV file&amp;quot; added&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen_160.png|Predefine tools|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Start_output]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since October 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Pick_engraver_tools_from_a_jacket_according_to_a_list|Isolation milling]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Tools can be allocated picking them from their place in a jacket.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:polygon160.png|Polygonal ground planes|link=Signal_polygon]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Signal_polygon|Polygonal ground planes]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Any filled polygon on a copper layer can be furnished with a signal. Each can be handled like a separate ground plane. It can individually be furnished with attributes. On one copper layer any number of polygons with different signals can be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:stueckliste160.png|Boost your BoM|link=Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Bill_of_Material_BOM#The_list_of_the_BoM|Boost your BoM]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Bill of material (BoM): If you add a certain property to a part and you also add the leading characters &amp;quot;BOM-&amp;quot;, this particular property automatically will appear in the BoM.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:fraesen160.png|Engraving bit calculator|link=Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Engraving_insulation_channels#Copper_top|Engraving bit calculator]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Insulation milling: In insulation milling copper tracks are circumscribed by an engraving bit. The width of the rubout depends on the angle of its tip and its immersion depth. Calculate these parameters quickly by the use of the Engraving bit calculator in menu &amp;quot;Engraving Insulation channels&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:dukoZaun160.jpg|Via fence|link=Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Via fence]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Signal tracks can on both sides be fenced by a chain of vias. High frequency signals by this means can be shielded from external electromagnetic influence.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:lochraster160.png|Breadboard|link=Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Breadboard]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Polygonale breadboard area: Create any polygonal breadboard area in your layout. Hples have the property of a via. You may edit each afterwards or give it a signal. But this is no must. By means of such breadboard areas you easily create &amp;quot;creativity buffers&amp;quot; for your design. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:password160.png|Password protection|link=Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Password_protection]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Protect your project from third party access by the use of a password. But not only a project can be protected: All projects, being created by your license can automatically be protected by a &amp;quot;licence password&amp;quot;. This one is demanded if one of your projects shall be opened by a TARGET öicense other than yours. So you protect your intellectual property from third party access. Also a &amp;quot;drift off&amp;quot; towards the spheres of your competitors will be avoided.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:pdf160.png|Instant PDF|link=PDF_creation]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2017:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[PDF_creation|Instant PDF]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: Create a PDF file of your circuit diagram or PCB without a PDF printer. Achieve a quick transfer of your designs as a PDF. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:componiverse_n.jpg|160px|COMPONIVERSE®: New engine, new look, new features|link=https://www.ibfriedrich.com/en/componiverse_introduction/index.html]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Componiverse|COMPONIVERSE®]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;: The interactive component cloud of the  TARGET 3001! community. Load up your components and download the ones others have uploaded.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The TARGET 3001! component exchange. New engine, new look, new features.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:onequestion_n_e.jpg|160px|One question: Ask a question to a certain issue]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[One question...|Ask a question]]: TARGET 3001! internal FAQ system. Correlates to the TARGET dialog from which the question has been asked.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:samacsys_n.jpg|160px|SamacSys: Cooperation with component portal]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since September 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Components of the British component portal [[Samacsys|SamacSys]] can instantly be overtaken to TARGET 3001!. Select components found and place them by drag and drop to your TARGET 3001!-design. Free software &amp;quot;Library Loader&amp;quot; required.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:pickplaceprop.jpg|160px|Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. Here: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since August 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Pick and place: Individual properties can be processed. In this example it&#039;s the properties: STOCK_NO and BOX_NO.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:cappedvia.jpg|160px|Plugged and capped vias]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Introduced &amp;quot;Plugged&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Capped&amp;quot; for vias and pads (e.g. for thermal vias)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:PinTextfunktionSignalname.jpg|160px|Signal name as text function]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since July 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Pin names in schematic symbols can also have the signal name as text function (e.g. for a RS232 D-sub 9)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:polygonalepads.jpg|160px|Polygonale Pads]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Polygonal pads: Increased visible resolution&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:ToolbarpaletteLeiterbahn.jpg|160px|Leiterbahnvorlagen]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since June 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Toolbar: Palette &amp;quot;Tracks&amp;quot;: Programmed buttons also affect tracks yet to come&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:Symbolgeneratoralfanumerisch.jpg|160px|Pin names alphanumerical]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since May 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Symbol generator: Pin numbers also alphanumerical (A1, A2 ... B1 ...)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:2x2meter.jpg|160px|2 by 2 meters drawing area]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since April 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Maximum area now 2m x 2m or 6.5ft x 6.5ft.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:NeuesBtlErstellenDlg_e.jpg|120px|Component editor]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  &lt;br /&gt;
* Component editor: Get a new component quickly.&lt;br /&gt;
* Offers subsequently the automatic functions needed. &lt;br /&gt;
* A new symbol and/or package can be derived from existing ones!&lt;br /&gt;
* See menu: Components/Create a new component...&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:RectangleByCoordinates.jpg|120px|Rectangle]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* New tool for a quicker design of rectangles.&lt;br /&gt;
* Simply enter mesurements in cm or coordinates.&lt;br /&gt;
* Drag from the center or from the side.&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions [[image:RechteckKoordIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;height:auto; margin:0; margin-top:10px; margin-right:2px; border:2px solid #dfdfdf; padding:0.3em 1em 0.7em 1em; background-color:#f8f8ff;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;background-color:#f8f8ff&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:TextTag_e.jpg|120px|TextTag]]||&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;NEW since March 2016:&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* Text Tag offering useful textfunctions.&lt;br /&gt;
* Place comments, advice, notes of any kind to schematic or layout&lt;br /&gt;
* See drawing functions  [[image:TextTagIcon.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;read more in the [https://www.ibfriedrich.com/target/english/logbook.txt TARGET 3001! LOGBOOK]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:homepage]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aktuelles]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Thèmes actuels]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29398</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29398"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:48:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (=Point)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Thickness&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotation&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [r]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Stiff&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [r]]] later on, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text even upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a conducting element and a potential ground plane. This spacing width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Function&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be &amp;quot;Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variables. The following variable types can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., NE555, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29397</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29397"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:47:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font Width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (=Point)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Thickness&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Rotation&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [r]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Stiff&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [r]]] later on, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text even upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a conducting element and a potential ground plane. This spacing width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Function&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; can be &amp;quot;Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variables. The following variable types can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., NE555, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29396</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29396"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:13:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use &amp;quot;Arial&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Times New Roman.&amp;quot; These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; &amp;quot;Segoe UI&amp;quot; is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the &amp;quot;Up Arrow&amp;quot; button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the &amp;quot;TARGET&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;DIN-ISO-ANSI&amp;quot; fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Fixed&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a &amp;quot;rectangle.&amp;quot; You can determine when this point is reached in the &amp;quot;[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]&amp;quot; dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29395</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29395"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:09:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field to capital letters or lowercase letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29394</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29394"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:08:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter Omega for Ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29393</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29393"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:05:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;[OK]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [Enter] to place the text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29392</id>
		<title>Screen resolution - Pixels - Scaling - Blurry</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Screen_resolution_-_Pixels_-_Scaling_-_Blurry&amp;diff=29392"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:02:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs automatically. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET will automatically enlarge its interface and dialogs. This makes them easy to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Scaling.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(Figure 1: Windows scaling, here 125%)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If the screen resolution of TARGET is too high or too low, or if text elements appear too large, too small, or blurry/washed out, it may be helpful to find the settings that Windows uses for TARGET:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:High dpi.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Résolution d&#039;écran - Pixels - Mise à l&#039;échelle - Affichage flou]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auflösung - Bildschirmauflösung - Resolution - Pixel - Skalierung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29391</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29391"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T18:00:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Font blurred, image unsharp */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with &#039;&#039;&#039;V34&#039;&#039;&#039;, TARGET itself can scale all its dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with a very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger scale. This makes them easier to handle and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29390</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29390"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:55:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Internet links and links to files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also include links to Internet content (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into texts, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., &amp;quot;Z:\directory\file.xyz,&amp;quot; as well as file paths in UNC format: &amp;quot;\\server\directory\file.xyz&amp;quot; or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: &amp;quot;&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de&amp;quot; .The user is then asked whether he wants to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29389</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29389"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:49:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click to directly access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the &amp;quot;Content&amp;quot; field of the text dialog. You can also do a double-click [[M11]] on a character below in the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29388</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29388"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:46:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of Unicode characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29387</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29387"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:44:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, icons, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29386</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29386"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:42:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29385</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29385"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:39:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Dimensioning angles and radii */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29384</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29384"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:29:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29383</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29383"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:28:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29382</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29382"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:28:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Unicode special chars and foreign languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29381</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29381"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:27:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Position&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Under &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Content&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;[multiline]&#039;&#039;&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Windows]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[Unicode]&#039;&#039;&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A]&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;[a]&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The &#039;&#039;&#039;[A✓]&#039;&#039;&#039; button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a &#039;&#039;&#039;font&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows &amp;quot;borrows&amp;quot; from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Font height&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;- width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the &#039;&#039;&#039;font size in pt (points)&#039;&#039;&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;stroke width&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (&#039;&#039;&#039;Alignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Mirrored&#039;&#039;&#039;). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Fixed”&#039;&#039;&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Right-aligned&#039;&#039;&#039;shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Italic&#039;&#039;&#039; makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layer&#039;&#039;&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Aura&#039;&#039;&#039; represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the &#039;&#039;&#039;“Minimum Width”&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;“Function”&#039;&#039;&#039; text can be “Normal Text&amp;quot;, meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component value&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Symbol name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pin name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Modification time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039;&#039; for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output time&#039;&#039;&#039; for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Output scale&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Project name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;File name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Special property&#039;&#039;&#039; for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant&#039;&#039;&#039; for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component type&#039;&#039;&#039; for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Page name&#039;&#039;&#039; for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Number&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Variant Revision&#039;&#039;&#039; for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal Pages&#039;&#039;&#039; for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Component Usage&#039;&#039;&#039; For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Version&#039;&#039;&#039; For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Comment&#039;&#039;&#039; For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Highest Page Number&#039;&#039;&#039; For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Panel_13a.png&amp;diff=29380</id>
		<title>File:Panel 13a.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Panel_13a.png&amp;diff=29380"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:18:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29379</id>
		<title>Crash Course Frontpanel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29379"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:17:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel1ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel1_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel2ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel2_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel3ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel3_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:panelpool_frontpanel2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:moreExamples.png|right|link=http://www.panel-pool.com/fpuk/info_beispiele.html]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1.png]]||[[Determine size of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1a.png]]||[[Select material and thickness of front panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_2.png]]|| [[Set grid values]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_3.png]]||[[Insert a rectangular or oblong break-out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_4.png]]||[[Insert a round, rectangular or oblong sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_5.png]]||[[Insert a D-form breakout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_6.png]]||[[Insert elements from the library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_7.png]]||[[Place a drill hole]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_8.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a thread]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_9.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_10.png]]||[[Insert an imprinted text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_11.png]]||[[Insert engraved text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_12.png]]||[[Insert a scale]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13.png]]||[[Insert a picture or logo]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:panel_13a.png]]||[[DXF|Import a DXF file (as front panel outline)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13b.png]]||[[3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_14.png]]||[[Compute milling paths]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_15.png]]||[[Calculate and send order]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:faq41.jpg]]||[[Front panel questions|Frequently asked questions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please also have a look at:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Create and save a milling pattern]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurzeinführung Frontplatte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Crash Course Face Avant]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:First steps]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29378</id>
		<title>Crash Course Frontpanel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Crash_Course_Frontpanel&amp;diff=29378"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T17:17:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel1ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel1_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel2ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel2_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;plainlinks&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[image:frontpanel3ikone.png|300px|right|link=//server.ibfriedrich.com/video/e/frontpanel/frontpanel3_e.mp4]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:panelpool_frontpanel2.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:moreExamples.png|right|link=http://www.panel-pool.com/fpuk/info_beispiele.html]]&lt;br /&gt;
{| border=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; cellspacing=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; cellpadding=&amp;quot;10&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1.png]]||[[Determine size of front panel]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_1a.png]]||[[Select material and thickness of front panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_2.png]]|| [[Set grid values]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_3.png]]||[[Insert a rectangular or oblong break-out]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_4.png]]||[[Insert a round, rectangular or oblong sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_5.png]]||[[Insert a D-form breakout]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_6.png]]||[[Insert elements from the library]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_7.png]]||[[Place a drill hole]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_8.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a thread]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_9.png]]||[[Place a drill hole with a sink]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_10.png]]||[[Insert an imprinted text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_11.png]]||[[Insert engraved text]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_12.png]]||[[Insert a scale]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13.png]]||[[Insert a picture or logo]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Bild:panel_13a.png]]||[[DXF|Import a DXF file (as front panel outline)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_13b.png]]||[[3D view of the front panel in the Internet browser]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_14.png]]||[[Compute milling paths]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:panel_15.png]]||[[Calculate and send order]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[image:faq41.jpg]]||[[Front panel questions|Frequently asked questions]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please also have a look at:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Create and save a milling pattern]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kurzeinführung Frontplatte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Crash Course Face Avant]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:First steps]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29377</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29377"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:42:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29376</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29376"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:41:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At least two text elements must be selected for the menu item to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29375</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29375"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:23:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Left-aligned, right-aligned or aligned horizontally)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29374</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29374"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:22:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Left-aligned, right-aligned or horizontal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:AlignTexts.jpg&amp;diff=29373</id>
		<title>File:AlignTexts.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:AlignTexts.jpg&amp;diff=29373"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:22:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29372</id>
		<title>Context menu</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Context_menu&amp;diff=29372"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T16:14:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;By clicking the right mousekey &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M2]]&#039;&#039;&#039; a context menu opens which allows to set several properties.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The context menu  in schematic and layout differs only by the entries &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Page&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Layers&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[Image:kontextS_e.jpg]]||[[Image:kontextL_e.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in schematic view&#039;&#039;&#039;||&#039;&#039;&#039;The context menu in layout view&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039;: Please have a look in the [[Module]] article&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Page&#039;&#039;&#039;: You can create a new (additional) schematic [[Page|page]] or manouvre between the pages&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Layers&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog &amp;quot;[[Layer|PCB layers]]&amp;quot; opens. It shows the current layer configuration and allows all layer settings.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Grid&#039;&#039;&#039;: The dialog [[Grid|Window grid]] allows all grid settings as well as the preferred drawing unit (metric or imperial). &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Simulationmodel&#039;&#039;&#039;: After an Info-box the dialog &amp;quot;Models for ...&amp;quot; opens. You can edit the [[Simulation]]model of the component selected.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Edit properties&#039;&#039;&#039;: A component needs to be highlighted for edition. The dialog  [[Edit|&amp;quot;Edit the selected elements&amp;quot;]] opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, selected text can also be aligned:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AlignTexts.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Left-aligned, right-aligned or horizontal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When aligning to the left, the text that starts furthest to the left is used as a reference. When aligning to the right, the text that ends furthest to the right is used as a reference. If you want to align to the top, the text located furthest at the top is used as a reference. When aligning to the left or right, TARGET will then ask whether the texts should be distributed evenly vertically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category: Menus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
.[[de: Kontextmenü]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr: Menu contextuelle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29371</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29371"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:57:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Tolerances and alternative unit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29370</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29370"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:56:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tolerances and alternative unit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with version 34, you can also specify tolerances and select a second unit in parentheses. If the plus and minus tolerances are identical, TARGET combines them into a single ± value. The following result is displayed:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure4.jpg&amp;diff=29369</id>
		<title>File:Measure4.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure4.jpg&amp;diff=29369"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:54:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Measure4.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure5.jpg&amp;diff=29368</id>
		<title>File:Measure5.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:Measure5.jpg&amp;diff=29368"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:51:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Harald Friedrich uploaded a new version of File:Measure5.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29367</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29367"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:50:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können ab der V34 auch Toleranzen angeben und eine zweite Einheit in Klammern wählen. Sind die  Toleranzen plus und minus identisch, dann fasst TARGET diese zu einem ±-Wert zusammen. Es zeigt sich das folgende Ergebnis:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29366</id>
		<title>Measure</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Measure&amp;diff=29366"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T15:49:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Entering non measure values */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by key &#039;&#039;&#039;[u]&#039;&#039;&#039;,&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039;Measure and dimensioning&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot; in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Menu Actions]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
or by the tool [[Image:Measure.jpg]] under the icon [[Image:edit.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
with &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M12]]&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a quick information the little info box might be sufficient. It is fixed to the cursor as soon as you press the [u]-key for meas&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;u&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ring:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:messen_box_e.jpg|none|Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;]]Image: Infobox at &amp;quot;measure&amp;quot;. The mouse pointer was moved after pressing the [u] key from the red border in the north over the white to the south to the opposite red border. The black line shows the distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;It means: L=Length of the air wire of the measurement, M=Manhattan Metric= dY+dX, Phi=Angle measured from the starting point of the measurement, started at 15:00 (= 0°) counterclockwise.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Measure and dimensioning ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status line shows the x- and y-portions of the distance (dx and dy), the distance itself (L) and the Manhattan-length (M=dx+dy). When drawing tracks also see the signal length (S). You might switch off the grid for a short time with &#039;&#039;&#039;[F6]&#039;&#039;&#039; to measure very exactly.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Add a dimensioning by pressing...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure1.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &#039;&#039;&#039;...[u]&#039;&#039;&#039; at the starting point&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure2.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and a mouseclick &#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039; at the end of a distance.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure3.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Now hover the mouse orthogonally to open area and click again.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   Confirm the opening dialog...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;   ...and see the digits of the dimensioning on your layout or schematic.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edit the digits like normal text (doubleclick on it or single click and &#039;&#039;&#039;[e]&#039;&#039;&#039; for edit, then follow the dialog).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Toleranzen und alternative Maßeinheit ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bild:Measure4.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sie können ab der V34 auch Toleranzen angeben und eine zweite Einheit in Klammern wählen. Sind die  Toleranzen plus und minus identisch, dann fasst TARGET diese zu einem ±-Wert zusammen. Es zeigt sich das folgende Ergebnis:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bild:Measure5.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Entering non measure values ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a different value to the measure dialog box than the one given, e.g. 4.00m instead of 8.255mm, the value is marked by an underscore. This is to indicate that the figure shown is not the one measured by scale but a different figure, entered following the idea of the layouter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:realmassDEF.jpg|none]]Image: The value entered does not represent the real length of the line but a individual value chosen by the designer. indicated by underscore.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Finding coordinates that are not on the grid ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be able to measure things that are not on the grid, use the [+] key to find these points. Look [[Coordinates|here]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning the drills of the complete layout ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning1.jpg|none]]Find it in menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot; on the bottom of the list.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning2.jpg|none]]First you get asked from which diameter the dimensioning shall be displayed. Here we want to have all dimensions from drills bigger than 1.3 mm (included)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_dimensioning3.jpg|none]]&lt;br /&gt;
That is how it comes out. The digits can be edited like any text.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning using a snap point ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the function &amp;quot;Measure and dimensioning&amp;quot; from menu &amp;quot;Actions&amp;quot;. In the status bar you can read &amp;quot;Measure from...&amp;quot;. Hover the mouse close to the starting point but you don&#039;t click. Instead you press keyboard key [+]  Now you can choose from significant points nearby by the use of the keyboard keys &amp;quot;up&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;down&amp;quot; in order to determine the desired snap point. The cursor follows. Press key &amp;quot;Return&amp;quot; for OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In respect to the target coordinate you do exactly the same: move the mouse close to the measuring target. No click! Press key [+], select the point of interest using the arrow keys and press [Return]. Now you only need to decide where to put the measuring arrow (an element of technical drawing). Done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dimensioning angles and radii ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As of V33, you can also dimension angles and radii very easily:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WinkelUndRadien.png|alt=Angles and Radii]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Image: Dimensioning angles and radii&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
For an angle, use the menu item &amp;quot;Actions / Angle dimensioning&amp;quot;. First click on the center point with [[M1]] and define the first leg and then the angle and the arc line with the arrows. You can determine whether the angle is displayed in a clockwise direction by the direction in which you sweep over the start leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then define the shape of the label in the dialog that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To dimension a radius, please select an arc (torus). Three small black boxes will appear. In the context menu ([[M2]]) of the black boxes, select the &amp;quot;Dimension radius / diameter&amp;quot; item and use [[M1]] to define the direction and length of the arrow. A diameter symbol also appears next to the text in the dialog for full circles. Otherwise, the radius is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Messen und Bemaßen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mesurer et coter]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:actions]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29354</id>
		<title>Text</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Text&amp;diff=29354"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:19:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: /* Elements of the Text dialog */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== General ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can reach this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[&amp;quot;]&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Text&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Elements&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;&#039; or&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by the tool [[Image:Text.jpg]] subsumed under the &amp;quot;pencil&amp;quot; icon (the drawing functions).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
What you can do...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]] to where the text later shall appear. Enter the text and its options to the following dialog. Close the dialog with &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; to place the text. Caution: Win 95/98/ME have an old 16-bit graphic, which is not able to mirror Windows fonts. Only the font TARGET can be mirrored in Win 95/98/ME. The Windows fonts can only be mirrored by the 32-bit graphic of Win NT4/2000/XP/Vista.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Windows fonts can be mirrored only with the Windows NT4/2000/XP 32-bit graphics. Windows 95/98/ME with its 16-bit graphics can&#039;t do this. The TARGET 3001! Gerber driver is not able to output Windows fonts. They are replaced by the font TARGET. Always check the result of this replacement please!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this mode...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
by &#039;&#039;&#039;[ESC]&#039;&#039;&#039; or [[Mousekeys|&#039;&#039;&#039;M1&#039;&#039;&#039;]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Elements of the Text dialog ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:TextOptDialog.jpg|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Position&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the “bottom-left” corner of the first letter of the text. The coordinates displayed are those of your current cursor position.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Under ‘’&#039;“Content”‘’&#039;, you can enter a name or several words (one line).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;[multiline]‘’&#039; button allows you to enter a longer text. The ‘’&#039;[Windows]‘’&#039; button opens the operating system&#039;s window for entering special characters. You can also open this by pressing the [Win] + [.] keys on your keyboard. The ‘’&#039;[Unicode]‘’&#039; button opens a dialog where you can select from thousands of Unicode special characters. See below. Some ASCII special characters can be selected here as well, including the Greek letter omega for ohm.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘[A]‘’’ and ‘’‘[a]‘’’ buttons let you convert the selected text in the “Content” field to capital letters or small letters. The ‘’‘[A✓]‘’’ button starts the spelling checker.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After that, you can select a ‘’&#039;font&#039;‘’. You can safely use “Arial” or “Times New Roman.” These fonts also display many special characters, which Windows ‘borrows’ from other fonts in the background; “Segoe UI” is excellent for special characters. Always check whether all desired characters are displayed correctly in all output drivers. Also check whether the height and width of the font cause any problems. Additionally, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, the line fonts “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” are available in case there are difficulties with the conversion of Windows fonts in subsequent processes. If you select DIN-ISO-ANSI as the font, additional special characters will be available; you can scroll through and view them before inserting them into the text line using the “Up Arrow” button.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to create multilingual documentation, you can also enter text for foreign languages. In the toolbar at the top, you can then click on the flag and change the language for texts in the project.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’&#039;“Font height”‘’&#039; and ‘’&#039;“-width”‘’&#039; define the average letter dimensions. However, Windows fonts may deviate from these defaults. Starting with V34, you can also specify the ‘’&#039;font size in pt (points)‘’&#039;, as you are accustomed to doing in your word processor. Font height and width are set accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’‘“stroke width”’‘’ is used directly by the “TARGET” and “DIN-ISO-ANSI” fonts. All other fonts switch from normal to bold between 10% and 20%.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Characters can be rotated and mirrored as desired (‘’‘Alignment’‘’ and ‘’‘Mirrored’‘’). All Texts in TARGET 3001! behave in such a way during later [[Rotation|Rotation with [d]] that they are always readable from the bottom or from the right, in accordance with DIN.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; The ‘’&#039;“Fixed”‘’&#039; setting specifies that a signature will simply rotate rigidly along with the object when [[Rotate|rotated with [d]]] later, contrary to this rule. This allows you to turn text upside down. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; ‘‘‘Right-aligned’’’ shifts the text&#039;s anchor point to the right, and ‘’‘Italic’‘’ makes the text tilted.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Page’’’ determines on which schematic page the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘‘&#039;Layer’’&#039; determines on which layout layer the text element should be placed (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
‘’‘Aura’‘’ represents the minimum distance between a leading element and a potential ground plane. The width can be set here (if applicable).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
When zooming out, there comes a point where the font becomes so small that it is no longer displayed and appears only as a “rectangle.” You can determine when this point is reached in the “[[Settings / Options|Settings and Options]]” dialog, by specifying a pixel value in the ‘’&#039;“Minimum Width”‘’&#039; field. The smaller the number, the further you can zoom out while the text remains legible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘’&#039;“Function”‘’&#039; text can be “Normal Text,” meaning free text elements. Text elements can also be defined variably. The following variables can be selected:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component name&#039;‘’ for the component reference name (e.g., IC17, R15)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component value&#039;‘’ (e.g., 4040, 4k7)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Symbol name&#039;‘’ for the name of a symbol (e.g., IC17c)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039; &#039;‘&#039;Signal name’&#039;&#039; for the name of a signal (e.g., GND, Sig$13)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Pin name&#039;‘’ for the  name of a pin (e.g., RES\, Pin8)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification date&#039;‘’ for the last save date (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Modification time&#039;‘’ for the last save time&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output date&#039;‘’ for the date of the print or Gerber output (takes into account the [[Project variables|project variable]] DATE_FORMAT if applicable)&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output time&#039;‘’ for the time of print or Gerber output&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Output scale&#039;‘’ for the current scale&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Project name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project without the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;File name&#039;‘’ for the name of the project with the file extension&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page number&#039;‘’ for the current schematic page number&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Special property&#039;‘’ for custom properties&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant&#039;‘’ for the variant name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Component type&#039;‘’ for the component&#039;s search name&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Page name&#039;‘’ for the name of the current schematic page&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Number&#039;‘’ for the number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Variant Revision&#039;‘’ for the revision number of the variant on which a specific text should appear&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’&#039;Signal Pages&#039;‘’ for the number of schematic pages on which a signal appears&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Component Usage’‘’ For specifying a specific purpose for the component&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Version’‘’ For the version of the schematic from the [[Info]] dialog&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Comment’‘’ For comments that should not be included in the output or printout&lt;br /&gt;
*‘’‘Highest Page Number’‘’ For the number of the last page used in the schematic&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Changes to component names, component values, and symbol names affect the entire component and are transferred back and forward between the schematic and the PCB. The same applies to signal names and signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_TextOptDlg.jpg|left]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unicode special chars and foreign languages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use thousands of special character and foreign language characters in TARGET and output them in all available formats. This means that virtually all language families in the world are represented, as well as many technical and commercial symbols, including emojis:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:UnicodeChars.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
(special characters, characters, pictograms, and emoticons)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the [Unicode] button, you can open the dialog for selecting Unicode characters. At the very top, you can select a range of characters from the list box. The Arial, Times New Roman, and Segue UI fonts provide a large number of characters for you to choose from. Characters not directly available in the selected font are often automatically replaced by characters found in other fonts through a sophisticated system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the right are several buttons with collections of special characters that let you click directly to access interesting Unicode ranges. You can also search for Unicode characters online and enter their code in hexadecimal or decimal format at the top. Clicking the [OK] button inserts the corresponding character into the “Content” field of the text dialog. You can also double-click [[M11]] on a character at the bottom of the character matrix to insert it directly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multilingual text within one project ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All documentations and text fragments can be edited in three languages, let&#039;s say in English, German and in French.  After you have placed a lettering in English language (for example the advice: &amp;quot;Don&#039;t solder&amp;quot;). Click in schematic or layout double on this text. The &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; dialog dialog opens:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:English.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In section&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_InhAndSprach.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
tick the boxes for further languages which you&#039;d like to use and write the text into the lines. For demonstrational reasons we have used the words &amp;quot;Ne pas souder&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Nicht löten&amp;quot;. If you enter OK, you first see only the English lettering. This is, because you are in the English language documentation of the project. Please note the English/American flag on screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you click on the flag, the following dialog appears:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:e_SprachAuswDLG.jpg|none]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on a radiobutton to see the letterings in a different language. Viewing the flag, you see which language version you currently work with. Text can be edited in three languages simultaneously. Which kind of language you use don&#039;t matter.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Important note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Multilingual text within one project has nothing to do with &amp;quot;variants&amp;quot;. It is a separate, independent text function.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Internet links and links to files ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can also insert links to the Internet (URLs) or links to local files on the intranet into text, which users can then open by double-clicking:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:LinksEN.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Links to URLs or files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you insert a link into a text element, you can later double-click the text ([[M11]]) and TARGET will open the corresponding resource in Windows. If you want to edit such text, please select it and press the [e] key to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
File paths with drive letters are supported, e.g., “Z:\directory\file.xyz,” as well as file paths in UNC format: “\\server\directory\file.xyz,” or URLs for Internet access via HTTP or HTTPS: “.&amp;amp;#104;ttps://domain.de” .The user is then asked whether they want to execute the link. A warning is also displayed stating that it can be dangerous to execute links from unknown sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A URL link is forwarded to Windows, which then opens the default web browser and displays the link. For links to local files, the application associated with that file type is launched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjust the size of all text elements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Highlight the complete layout by the use of a [[Capture Window]]. Press keyboard key &amp;quot;[e]&amp;quot; for &#039;&#039;&#039;e&#039;&#039;&#039;dit. The dialog : &amp;quot;Edit the selected Elements&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tick the box &amp;quot;Texts&amp;quot; and press OK. The dialog &amp;quot;Change Texts&amp;quot; opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:aenderntext_dlg2_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now do all desired adjustments. If you only  want to change (= highlight) certain elements, please use the  [[Select#Selection_assistant|Selection Assistant]] in menu &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:auswassi_text_e.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example for the selection of texts of resistors having octagonal pads.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Place a component property as text close to the symbol or package ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In schematic and layout all properties a component has can be placed like a text aside of the component. First activate the text mode. Hover the cursor over the handle cross of the desired component. Now press keyboard key [&amp;quot;] for opening the text mode dialog &amp;quot;Text Options&amp;quot;. Now choose the text function: &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot; see image (section in red)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr1_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As soon as the special property as a text function is activated, a list opens from which you can select the desired property, e.g. &amp;quot;Last Modified&amp;quot;, the date of the latest modification of a part.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then press [OK] and confirm the dialog of the &amp;quot;Text Option&amp;quot; too. See the new text in the image below on the right hand side, the LAST MODIFIED-Date. You can select this text, place it at your convenience and change the font. Take care to have this text placed to an appropriate layer. In most cases it is layer 21,position top. If such a project variable or a component property is empty, the text &amp;lt;empty&amp;gt; is displayed. If you do not want this, you can enter a special space character in the property: Hold down the [Alt] key and type 0 1 6 0 in the numeric keypad. Then release [Alt] again. This creates this special space character.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:BautBeschr3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you eventually have to release this button  [[image:BautBeschr4.jpg]]  for touching and selecting only the text. You&#039;ll find it in the [[Sidebar]] under section [[Sidebar#Section settings|Settings]].&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Write a comment next to a part ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the keyboard key [Shift]+[2] to open the text dialog. The cursor changes its image, so you are in text mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment2_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[M1]]&#039;&#039;&#039; where you want the first character (its bottom left) of the text line to begin. The text dialog opens.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kommentar_d.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Text function &amp;quot;Comment&amp;quot; in order to give your writing this property. Comments are only visible in TARGET when editing. They are suppressed in all outputs (print, PDF, DXF, PostScript, HPGL, Eagle, etc.)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to write more than one line of Text, press the &amp;quot;multiline&amp;quot; button to open a text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment3_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result could look like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:comment4_e.jpg]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The square boxes of the blank lines indicate that the text is multi line (= quantity text). Double-click the box to enter something. Otherwise just highlight and delete them. You can double-click each line to edit it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Project Variables ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to have project variables shown (e.g. in schematics headers) do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add text field &#039;&#039;Function&#039;&#039; &amp;quot;Special property&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Target will ask you the type. Create a new type, e.g. &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Settings - Project Variables&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*add a new property type &amp;quot;document number&amp;quot; and give it a value like &amp;quot;T3001&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now you can add the same text function to multiple sheets and places and to update them easily. This makes updating the headers much more easy. It is suggested adding required headers to a template you use.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Now the most important thing: To keep the content of field empty you need to give it a value ALT+160 (until filling with some other value is needed), like &amp;quot;reviewed&amp;quot; would be.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Text in ground plane ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please have a look here: [[Groundplane#Text_in_Ground_plane]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Font blurred, image unsharp ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with ‘’&#039;V34&#039;‘’, TARGET can scale all dialogs. If scaling is enabled in the Windows display settings (e.g., for a monitor with very high resolution), TARGET automatically displays its interface and dialogs at a larger size. This makes them easier to use, and the display of the actual circuit remains crystal clear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up to V33, this tip may help: If necessary, check the box in the properties of the TARGET exe (TarVxx.exe):&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:high_dpi.jpg|Tick box|none]]Image: Take a look at the properties of TarVxx.exe—check the box “Override high DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed by -&amp;gt; Application.”&lt;br /&gt;
Alias: Screen resolution, DPI, Pixel, Scaling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;quot;Output date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Date of change&amp;quot; are displayed cryptically ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the text variables &#039;&#039;Output date&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Date of change&#039;&#039;, which you can set in the text function area. Probably the date format is not correct. Please open Menu Settings/ Settings (Project)...&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:date_format_e.jpg|Date format|none]]Image: Set the date format according to dd.mm.yyyy, i.e. two digits for the day (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;d&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ay) and the month (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;m&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;onth) - four digits for the year (&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;y&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;ear)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Text]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Texte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Modes]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Elements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29351</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29351"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29341 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab der V34 können Sie sich Bauteile per KI direkt aus PDF-Datenblättern erzeugen lassen. Dazu müssen Sie nichts anderes tun, als ein aussagekräftiges Datenblatt herunterladen und TARGET zur Verfügung stellen. Das Datenblatt wird dabei zur Analyse an eine externe KI gesendet und dort analysiert. Dann erzeugt TARGET aus dem Datenbaltt ein Bauteilsymbol und schlägt ein (hoffentlich) vorhandenes Gehäuse dazu vor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Im Schaltplan-Menü &amp;quot;Bauteile / Spezialfunktionen&amp;quot; klicken Sie auf den Punkt &amp;quot;PDF-Datenblatt in Bauteil umsetzen (externe KI)&amp;quot;. Nach einer Erläuterung wählen Sie die PDF-Datei aus (meist im Windows-Ordner &amp;quot;Downloads&amp;quot;) und stellen die TARGET zur Verfügung. Geheime PDFs oder PDFs mit privatem Inhalt sollten Sie nicht hier hochladen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Besonders, wenn die Bauteil-Informationen im PDF als Bilder und nicht als Texte gespeichert sind, kann die Auswertung sehr lange dauern (OCR, KI-Thinking-Model). Wenn Sie nicht so lange warten möchten, können Sie den Vorgang abbrechen und z.B. nach einer Viertelstunde mit der identischen PDF-Datei nochmal starten. Die KI hat sich die erzeugte Antwort zu diesem PDF gemerkt und gibt das Ergebnis sofort zurück.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 1: Warten bis z.B. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; von der KI verarbeitet wurde)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bauteil-Symbol wurde von TARGET daraus erzeugt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 2: Fertiges Symbol, bereit zur Überprüfung und Veränderung)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Ihnen das Bauteil-Symbol gefällt, können Sie es nun als User-Bauteil exportieren:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 3: Bauteil insgesamt mit Taste [x] e&#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039;portieren)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dabei müssen Sie noch den Bauteiltyp auswählen (hier &amp;quot;Sonstige Audio&amp;quot; für einen Audio-Codec), den Namen eingeben (hier &amp;quot;VS1053b&amp;quot;), den Hersteller auswählen (hier &amp;quot;VLSI&amp;quot;), das richtige Gehäuse &amp;quot;LQFP48&amp;quot; auswählen (die KI hatte bei LQFP-48 noch einen Bindestrich eingebaut), ggf. eine Funktion aus dem PDF hereinkopieren und em Ende den Präfix &amp;quot;IC&amp;quot; auswählen. Mit dem Klick auf den Button [Bauteil speichern] ist die Arbeit beendet und das IC kann verwendet werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29350</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29350"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29342 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29349</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29349"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:02:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29343 by Judith Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Tool eignet sich vor allem für Bauteile mit vielen Anschlüssen und mit Standard-Gehäusen. Dann kann es viel Schreibarbeit sparen. Gehäuse selbst, z.B. für einen SMD-USB-Stecker werden davon nicht erzeugt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29348</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29348"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T14:00:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: Undo revision 29347 by Harald Friedrich (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 1: Wait until, for example, “vs1053.pdf” has been processed by the AI)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This component symbol was generated by TARGET from it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Image 2: Finished symbol, ready for review and modifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly well-suited for components with many connections and standard packages. It can save a lot of paperwork in such cases. However, it does not generate the packages themselves—for example, for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29347</id>
		<title>Create component from PDF</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=Create_component_from_PDF&amp;diff=29347"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:56:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also access “T-3001” without TARGET [https://office.ibfriedrich.com/chatBot/T-3001.html here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starting with V34, you can use AI to generate components directly from PDF datasheets. All you need to do is download a suitable datasheet and make it available to TARGET. The datasheet is sent to an external AI for analysis. TARGET then generates a component symbol from the datasheet and suggests a (hopefully) available package for it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the schematic menu under “Components / Special Functions,” click on “Convert PDF Datasheet to Component (External AI).” After a brief explanation, select the PDF file (usually in the Windows “Downloads” folder) and make it available to TARGET. You should not upload confidential PDFs or PDFs with private content here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Especially if the component information in the PDF is stored as images rather than text, the analysis can take a very long time (OCR, AI Thinking Model). If you don’t want to wait that long, you can cancel the process and, for example, start again after fifteen minutes with the same PDF file. The AI has remembered the generated response for this PDF and returns the result immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp1.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 1: Warten bis z.B. &amp;quot;vs1053.pdf&amp;quot; von der KI verarbeitet wurde)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dieses Bauteil-Symbol wurde von TARGET daraus erzeugt:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp2.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 2: Fertiges Symbol, bereit zur Überprüfung und Veränderung)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn Ihnen das Bauteil-Symbol gefällt, können Sie es nun als User-Bauteil exportieren:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PDF2Comp3.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(Bild 3: Bauteil insgesamt mit Taste [x] e&#039;&#039;&#039;x&#039;&#039;&#039;portieren)&lt;br /&gt;
This tool is particularly well-suited for components with many connections and standard packages. It can save a lot of paperwork in such cases. However, it does not generate the packages themselves—for example, for an SMD USB connector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Créer composant à partir d&#039;un PDF]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bauteil aus PDF erzeugen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp3.png&amp;diff=29346</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp3.png&amp;diff=29346"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:54:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp2.png&amp;diff=29345</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp2.png&amp;diff=29345"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:54:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp1.png&amp;diff=29344</id>
		<title>File:PDF2Comp1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://server.ibfriedrich.com/wiki/ibfwikien/index.php?title=File:PDF2Comp1.png&amp;diff=29344"/>
		<updated>2026-03-15T13:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Harald Friedrich: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Harald Friedrich</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>